دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsZ SeriesZ 7

Table Of Contents

ﺀﺎﻨﺜﺘﺳﺎﺑ

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﺋﺰﺟ ﻭﺃ

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﻠﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻦﻣ ﺎﻬﻠﻜﺷ ﻥﺎﻛ ﺎﻤﻬﻣ ﺔﺨﺴﻧ ﻱﺍ ﻞﻤﻋ ﺯﻮﺠﻳ ﻻ

ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻧ ﻦﻣ ﻲﻄﺧ ﺢﻳﺮﺼﺗ ﻥﻭﺩ ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺓﺪﻗﺎﻨﻟﺍ ﺕﻻﺎﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺰﺟﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﺱﺎﺒﺘﻗﻻﺍ

ﻦﺸﻳﺭﻮﺑﺭﻮﻛ

ﺓﺪﺤﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺭﺎﻣﻹﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻊﺒﻃ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﻕﻮﻓ ﺎﻤﻓ 3.00 ﺖﺑﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺒﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺫ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺎﺑ ﺹﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ

ﻊﺑﺎﺘﻟﺍ ﻞﻳﺰﻨﺘﻟﺍ ﺰﻛﺮﻣ ﻦﻣ ﻞﻳﺰﻨﺘﻠﻟ ﺡﺎﺘﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻠﻟ ﺖﺑﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﺞﻣﺎﻧﺮﺒﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺭﺍﺪﺻﺇ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ

.ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻨﻟ

•.ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻞﻣﺎﻜﻟﺎﺑ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺃﺮﻗﺍ

• "ﻚﺘﻣﻼﺳ ﻞﺟﻷ" ﻢﺴﻗ ﺓﺀﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺪﻛﺄﺗ ،ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻠﻟ ﺢﻴﺤﺼﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﻻﺍ ﻥﺎﻤﺿ

.(ix ﺔﺤﻔﺻ)

• ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻟﺍ ﻞﺟﺃ ﻦﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻝﻮﺻﻮﻟﺍ ﻞﻬﺴﻳ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ ،ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺓﺀﺍﺮﻗ ﺪﻋ

.ﻞﺒﻘﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ

ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺘﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺗ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻼﻟ ﺎ

ﹰ

ﻴﺋﻮﺿ ﺩﻮﻜﻟﺍ ﺢﺴﻣﺍ

.ﺔﻴﻠﻴﺼﻔﺘﻟﺍ

Z 7 ﺖﻧﺮﺘﻧﻹا ﻰﻠﻋ ﺮﻓﻮﺘﳌا نﻮﻜﻴﻧ ﻞﻴﻟد

Z 6

Summary of content (272 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 3.00‬ﻓﻤﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﻷﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ"‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪iv .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪1 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪27 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪41 ....................
PAGE 3
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻌﻲ )‪(pdf‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﹸﻣﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Z 7‬ﻭ‪ .Z 6‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Z 7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪ii ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ix ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ‪xiii...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪1 ........................................
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪41 .........................................................................(b‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪45 ................................................................................................... (b‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪49 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪49 .................................................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪92 .............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪92 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪92 ..........................................................................(AE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪92 .........................................................................................................
PAGE 9
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪125‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫‪https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/z7_z6/ar/‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪125 .................................................................................
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪171‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪171 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪171 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪176 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪177 ........................................................................................
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ" ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 13
‫• ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 14
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻄﻒ ﺑﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ • ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺬﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
xvi
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺺ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪72 ................................................
PAGE 20
‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪194....................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪151 ،8 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪142 ،43 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪110................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪90 .............................
PAGE 21
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18 17‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪8 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪8 ...............................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪188...................................‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺯﺭ ‪49 ............................................................K‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ‪51 ..............................................................O‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪10 ،6 ..................................
PAGE 22
‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ 6 17 .....................................‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪36 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ 7 64 ،24 .................................................... Fn1‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪37 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ 8 52 ،24 .................................................... Fn2‬ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ 9 32 ...................
PAGE 23
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" )‪.(180 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪5 75 ،73 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪74 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪6 34 ..........................................
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" )‪.(171 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10 9‬‬ ‫‪23456 7 89‬‬ ‫‪21 25 23‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪20 19 18 17 16 15‬‬ ‫‪22 20 1 19 18 13 17 16 15 14‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪11 72 ..
PAGE 25
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪74 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪75 ،73 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪139 ،132 ،111 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪144.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪133 ،115 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪60 ،10 .................................
PAGE 26
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻸﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 29
‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Z‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺮﹰﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﹰﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻤﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 9‬ﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)‪.(95 ،21 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 32
‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﹸﻣﺼﻨﱠﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻇﺎﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺯﺭ ‪DISP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪3 ،2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻻ ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 34
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ DISP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
PAGE 35
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(93 ،92 0‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ AF-ON‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ :D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪125...................................‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪127........................‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪135.........................‬‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪141..............‬‬ ‫‪ :B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪150.......................................‬‬ ‫‪ :N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪156..................................
PAGE 37
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ .G‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) i‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪(i‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (96 0‬ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(117 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 40
‫❚❚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(i‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪.f1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) J‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫• ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫• ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌ
PAGE 42
‫ﺯﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪(Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ( ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺯﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .J‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،Fn1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺰﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• )‪+ NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻉ ﺽ‬ ‫• ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ • ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ • ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ‪ c‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﹼﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﹸﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺏ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (ix 0‬ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ" )‪.(199 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪EH-7P‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) CHARGE‬ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ( ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪ D‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ .(q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ )‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻀﺎﺅﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ L‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ K‬ﺛﻢ ‪ J‬ﺛﻢ ‪ I‬ﻭ‪ .H‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،H‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺑﱢﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﹸ ﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،.‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .Z‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .OFF‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪.NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪F‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) FTZ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ (228 0 ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .F‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ F‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻓﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻚﹼ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (q‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(w‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚﹼ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.ON‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪ (Language‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 2‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺯﺭ ‪.(18 0 ،"G‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪") t‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"(‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﹸﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻳﻜﻔﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(b‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫"ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.b‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺻﺪﺭﻙ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) AF-ON‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 62
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(b‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.b‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﹸﺴ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،C‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪ 2 ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪×2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪×16‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ )ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ h‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ" )‪.(49 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ؛ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ AF-C‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﻮﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )‪ (92 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﻔﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ؛ ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫❚❚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪) a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .
PAGE 76
‫❚❚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪/‬ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪) a4‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻠ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫❚❚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﺍﻑ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ AF-ON‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪J‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.W‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ X‬ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (E‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻢ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )‪ (j‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﹸ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫‪*K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻺﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪*K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪-2500‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪10000‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹺﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،(0 104 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪") D D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"(‬ ‫‪) D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪4‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪) 4‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 5‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d5‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ"‪ .
PAGE 87
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟـﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻳﻜﺘﻢ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺭﻏﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ K‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .
PAGE 88
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .NX Studio‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﹰ ﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪P‬؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 3-2‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ b‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬ ‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪.(45 ،41 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ :P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ"(‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ )‪ .(U‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "×200‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )‪ .(80 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b1‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 1/3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.EV 1/2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪U3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ U3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪ D‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪ U2‬ﻭ‪U3‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮ ﹰﺣﺎ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 35‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪f/25 :‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) S‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 64‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ISO 25600‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Z 6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،(ISO 51200‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV 2‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ b‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪Lo 1–Lo 0.3 D‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Lo 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Lo 1‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV 1–0.3‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lo 0.3‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ (Z 7) ISO 50‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Z 6) 80‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Lo 1‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ISO 32‬‬ ‫)‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .(Z 6) 50‬ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﹸﻨﺼﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺭ ‪ S‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) EV −5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪EV +5‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) EV 1/3‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ −3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(EV +3‬ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،0.0±‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) E‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .±0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ" ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (E) c‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫)ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ .(Z 6‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪.(90 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪.(93 0‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪.(45 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺤ ﹴﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ )‪ (Z 7‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ )‪ (Z 6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ AF-S‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 111
‫❚❚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ (AF-S‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.i‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻋﹸ ﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) i‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ D-Lighting 8 97 ................ Picture Control‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪113..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪ 9 101.............................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪114.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 10 107......................
PAGE 115
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ ،Control‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(99 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 117
‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ ،Control‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ .Control‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،1‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪0.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Creative Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺼﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‪.
PAGE 120
‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 121
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ–)‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ–‬ ‫)‪ (M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫❚❚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،i‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﹺﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪r‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ‪ r‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ D‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( < ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪JPEG + NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪.
PAGE 126
‫‪NEF (RAW) A‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪."*.nef‬‬ ‫• ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺑـ"ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ ."NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ TIFF/JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ .NEF (RAW‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.TIFF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪b، P، S، A، M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪P، A‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b3‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪ .
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ )ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﹸﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪.SnapBridge‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﹸ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 131
‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺯﺭ ‪) E/c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(" )‪.(87 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )ﻣﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫‪Sport D‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺤﺴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ ﱠ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﱠﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﱢﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻨ ﱡﺒﺆﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ D-Lighting 8 118.............. Picture Control‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪123..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪ 9 118.............................................‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪123........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ 10 119.........
PAGE 136
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(97 0) "Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ"‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻳﹸﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ ("m‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ" ﻟـ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 139
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ bA‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ b1‬ﻭ‪) b20‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،bA‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ FX‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ "FX‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ DX‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ."DX‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ" )‪ ،(111 0‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.(112 0) "Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ" )‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ"‬ ‫)‪.(115 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/492/Z_7.html :Z 7‬‬ ‫‪https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ar/products/493/Z_6.html :Z 6‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫‪https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.
PAGE 144
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ 126‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ
PAGE 145
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(36×24) FX‬‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫‪(30×24) 5:4‬‬ ‫‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬ ‫‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫)‪ JPEG + NEF (RAW‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪m‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪JPEG/TIFF‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 128‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
PAGE 147
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .
PAGE 148
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﺍ ﹴﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻛﺌﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﻴﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ 130‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(sRGB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪+1.0 – −3.
PAGE 151
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫‪Sport‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍ
PAGE 152
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ × ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺾ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭ
PAGE 153
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪FX‬‬ ‫‪DX‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪3840×2160‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪3840×2160‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪3840×2160‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪120p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪100p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪60p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪50p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪30p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪25p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪24p‬‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 30p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 25p ×4‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪1920×1080‬؛ ‪) 24p ×5‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
PAGE 154
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫‪MP4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬ﻝ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 136‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(MOV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﺍ ﹴﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻛﺌﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﻴﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ 138‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎ ﹰﺣﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪30-0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 140‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪.
PAGE 160
‫‪ a7‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 161
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪ a13‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 162
‫‪ c3‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ d1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪CL‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ–‪ 1‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ d2‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪200–1‬‬ ‫‪ d3‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ–‪ 0.2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 163
‫‪ d7‬ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪ d9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 164
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ e4‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ c ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 165
‫‪ f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ f1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ i‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪ f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪AF-ON‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ f3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ f4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪ g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ g1‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ g2
PAGE 168
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫‪ g3‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫‪ g4‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+5 – −5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(4‬‬ ‫‪ g5‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪+5 – −5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .
PAGE 170
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ(‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑ
PAGE 171
‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪N-Log‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WR‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ(‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(WT-7‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪ ftp‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .WT-7‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.
PAGE 174
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪ 156‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪.N‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ i‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 176
‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ m/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 158‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺑﻨ ﹰﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• "ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ" )‪(160 0‬‬ ‫• "ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ" )‪(166 0‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d4‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d8‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ JPEG+NEF‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻃﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .NX Studio‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ NEF (RAW‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻭﺟﺔ )ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ( < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫––‪F‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫—‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ(‬ ‫‪Full‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪Err‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ؛‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .
PAGE 186
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫‪ For‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﺊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﺤﺸﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ *‪.‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 189
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ( ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪139 ،133 ،54...................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪138 ،131 ،113 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪137 ،130 ،97..................... Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪136 ،129 ،101 ،64....................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪128 ،107 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪135 ،127 ،122 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪128 ،109 .....................
PAGE 191
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 192
‫❚❚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪7 8‬‬ ‫‪12 3 4 5 6‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪12 72 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪73 ................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪77 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪148............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪146.............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪75 ،73 .......................................
PAGE 193
‫‪27 28‬‬ ‫‪20 21 22 23 24 25 26‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪30 154............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ ‪31 154............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪112.................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪33 131......................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪34 144.................................................
PAGE 194
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪8 45 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‪9 46 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪153...........‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪11 136 ،135 ،119 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ‪12 45 ................................
PAGE 195
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11 12 13‬‬ ‫‪4 5 6 7 8 9 10‬‬ ‫‪1 2 3‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪36 35 33 31 29 28 27 26 24 23‬‬ ‫‪34 32 30‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪12 34 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪13 145.............
PAGE 196
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪133...‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪133............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪133..........................................ADL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪133.........................................................HDR‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪133.........................................
PAGE 197
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪136 ،135 ،119 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪135..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪153...........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪45 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ"‪46 .........................
PAGE 198
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3 4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ 8 148............................‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪236 ،34 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪75 ،73 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ 9 85 ............‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪87 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ 10 85 .............
PAGE 199
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭ )‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﹰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪SB-600‬‬ ‫‪SB-5000‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪ qA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SB-500‬‬ ‫‪SB-910‬‬ ‫‪SB-900‬‬ ‫‪SB-800‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫‪SB-700‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫✔‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪SB-R200‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫]‪ [A:B‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪SB-400‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL i-TTL‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪SB-300‬‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫✔‬ ‫— ‪✔ ✔4‬‬ ‫— ‪— ✔4‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— ‪— ✔5‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫
PAGE 201
‫‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ qA/A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ qA‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ AWL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭ‪ qA‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ GN‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 202
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ،(qA‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 203
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،CLS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ "ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ‪ SB-80DX‬ﻭ‪ SB-28DX‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.SB-50DX‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 64‬ﻭ‪ (Z 7) 12800‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﻭ‪ .
PAGE 204
‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ 186‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :EN-EL15b‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ EN-EL15b‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ .EN-EL15/EN-EL15a/EN-EL15c‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪(228 0) FTZ‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) MC-DC2‬ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫‪ MC-DC2‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 206
‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪/WR-R10‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ :WR-T10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WR-R10‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) WR-T10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ ،WR-R10‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ME-1‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :ME-W1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :Camera Control Pro 2‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ .
PAGE 208
‫‪ D‬ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB/HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(q‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EP-5B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 210
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EH-5b/EH-5c‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ (e‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ .(r‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﱠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺘﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﺋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 212
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﹸﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ"‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 213
‫‪ D‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 214
‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ" )‪ .(194 0‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ؛ ﻓﻨﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺑﺮ‪ .
PAGE 216
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺯﻳﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .
PAGE 217
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 219
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ؛ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،99.99%‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 0.01%‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ .
PAGE 220
‫• ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺮﻏﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪° 15‬ﻡ ﻭ ‪° 25‬ﻡ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ‪.
PAGE 221
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺷﺤﻨﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Z 6/Z 7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 204‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Nikon Z‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Z‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ F‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ؛ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬ ‫• ‪ 45.7 :Z 7‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ‪ 24.5 :Z 6‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ 23.9 × 35.
PAGE 223
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×24) 1:1‬‬‫‪) 5504 × 5504‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 30.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 4128 × 4128‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 17.0 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2752 × 2752‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 7.6 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(36×20) 16:9‬‬‫‪) 4640 × 8256‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ 38.3 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 3480 × 6192‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ 21.5 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪) 2320 × 4128‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ 9.
PAGE 224
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 206‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ 12 :NEF (RAW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ؛ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﻐﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ؛ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• )‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫• ‪ :JPEG‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG-Baseline‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ ،(4
PAGE 225
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪-8‬ﺳﻢ‪-3.
PAGE 226
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ ،ISO 100‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪° 20 ،f/2.0‬ﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75%‬ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1.
PAGE 227
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻫﺠﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ )ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ • ‪) EV +19 – −2 :Z 7‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪(EV +19 – −4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪) EV +19 – −3.5 :Z 6 • ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 20 ،f/2.
PAGE 228
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ؛ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪ ISO 518‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ i-TTL‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ Creative Lighting System‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ،FV‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪FP‬‬ ‫)‪ (CLS‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ
PAGE 229
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪MP4 ،MOV‬‬ ‫‪ MPEG-4/H.
PAGE 230
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 212‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﻊ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺺ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(SuperSpeed USB) C‬؛ ﻳﹸﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪ MC-DC2‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎ
PAGE 231
‫‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ(‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪4.2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 2480-2402 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 2480-2402 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪:(EIRP‬‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 7‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 1.5 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 0 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬ ‫ ‪ :Z 6‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ 1.9 :‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻁ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ 0.
PAGE 232
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 67.5 × 100.5 × 134‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 675‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ؛ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 585‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 85%‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (CIPA‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 233
‫❚❚ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪) EH-7P‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 240–100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 0.5 ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ 5.0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 3.0/‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪/EN-EL15c‬‬ ‫‪ EN-EL15b‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 58.5 × 26.5 × 65.
PAGE 234
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 235
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ CFexpress‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CompactFlash‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ NVM Express .‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ NVM Express Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ IOS .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Cisco Systems، Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪ Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ Mac .
PAGE 236
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪(FreeType2) FreeType‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ FreeType‬ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2012‬‬ ‫)‪ .(https://www.freetype.org‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪) MIT‬ﺣﺮﻑﺑﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ HarfBuzz‬ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪2018‬‬ ‫)‪ .(https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character Database) A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/4 S‬ﻣﻢ‪NIKKOR Z 70–24‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﱠﺮ ﺃﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.
PAGE 238
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻫﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 239
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻚ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 240
‫❚❚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ؛ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻭ‪ 70‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪ (I‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 241
‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ (I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(I‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ )‪ (w‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺤﺎﺫﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(K‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.
PAGE 242
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﱢﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﱢﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 243
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﹸﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﱠﻄﺨﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﱠﺔ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﹰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﱠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﱠﻠﺔ ﺑﺨﻔﱠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻘﻄﱠ ﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﺜﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 244
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-72B‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪LF-N1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪HB-85‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪CL-C1‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻼﺷﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﱠﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﻟﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﹸ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﹼﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 245
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Nikon Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ 70 – 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪f/4‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ 11‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ED‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ ED‬ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭ(‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪´20 ° 34 – ° 84 :FX‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪´50 ° 22 – ° 61 :DX‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻣﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ )‪(70 ،50 ،35 ،28 ،24‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪ 0.
PAGE 246
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪FTZ‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ NIKKOR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻼ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) F‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) 1‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .1 NIKKOR‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻃﻘﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .
PAGE 247
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) F‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .
PAGE 248
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﻏﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ ،(q‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.
PAGE 249
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ )‪ (q‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(w‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (e‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )‪ .(r‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻛﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 250
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﱟ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/2.8‬ﻣﻢ‪) PC 35‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪–851001‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪AI‬‬ ‫‪(906200‬‬ ‫• ‪IX-NIKKOR‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/3.5‬ﻣﻢ‪) PC 35‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪TC-16A AF‬‬ ‫• ‪ f/6.
PAGE 251
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ .NIKKOR F‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﹼﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﺃ‪ .
PAGE 253
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ XQD‬ﻭ‪) CFexpress‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ .(B‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ 45‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (×300‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ Sony G-series QD-G64E XQD‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 64‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ (36×24) FX‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ ‪.
PAGE 255
‫‪:Z 6‬‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫)‪TIFF (RGB‬‬ ‫‪JPEG 3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 22.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 16.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 12.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 28.2‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 20.4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 24.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 38.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 44.1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 69.
PAGE 256
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 1 EN-EL15b‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 257
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﻮﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻮﺭﻳﺎ )ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﹸ ﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﹸﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﻪ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﹸﻣﻌﺮﱢﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 259
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 260
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪) b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪72 ،45 ،41 .....................................‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ(‪73 ،72 ..................................‬‬ ‫‪) S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟـﻮﻳــﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪73 ،72 .............................‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪74 ،72 ................................‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪75 ،72 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫‪77 ،72 ......................................................... U1/U2/U3‬‬ ‫‪) U‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‪114 ،90 ،87...................
PAGE 261
‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪218 .......................................................... PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪107 .....................................................................RGB‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪) S‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‪109 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪40.......................................................... SnapBridge‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪107 .........................................................(RGB) TIFF‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪) WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ( ‪101 ،64 ......................................‬‬ ‫‪112 .........
PAGE 262
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪8 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪124 ،116 ،62 ،53............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪68.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ‪85 ،76 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪85....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪24......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪123 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪110 ......................
PAGE 263
‫ﻅ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‪101 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪238 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪204 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪219 ،36 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‪49 ,11.................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪49 ،11 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪174 ،15 ......................................
PAGE 264
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪217 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪177 ،8 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪38........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪9 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪39....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪39.....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪122 ،109 ..........................................
PAGE 265
247
PAGE 266
248
PAGE 267
249
PAGE 268
250
PAGE 269
251
PAGE 270
252
PAGE 271
PAGE 272
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.